Sony | DAV-HDX275 | Sony DAV-HDX275 تعليمات التشغيل

3-283-031-42(1)
DVD Home Theatre
System
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
DAV-HDX275 / HDX276 / HDX475
©2008 Sony Corporation
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-42(1)
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ اﳊﺮﻳﻖ أﻭ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮض اﳉﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ أﻭ اﻟﺒﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﳉﻬﺎز ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰاﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺐ أﻭ‬
‫اﳋﺰاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮاﻛﺐ ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ﺑﺠﺮﻳﺪة أﻭ ﺳﲈط أﻭ ﺳﺘﺎرة‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺷﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب اﳊﺮﻳﻖ أﻭ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫ﳑﻠﻮءة ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ آﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺰﻫﻮر‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أﻭ اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﳊﺮارة‬
‫زاﺋﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ أﺷﻤﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﳌﺒﻨﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺼ ﹼﻨﻒ ﻛﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺰر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪CLASS 1١‬‬
‫‪ .LASER‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻨﺪ ﳏﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻇﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﰲ اﳉﺪار ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ اﳉﺪارﻱ ﻓﻮر ﹰا ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭث ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-42(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﲈء أﻭ اﺳﲈء ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫‪ DAV-HDX275‬ﻭ‪ DAV-HDX276‬ﻭ‪.DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-‬‬
‫‪ .HDX275‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ أﻱ اﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪» ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX275‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ "‪ "DVD‬ﻛﻌﺒﺎرة ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻭ‪DVD+RW/DVD+R‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪ S-AIR‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪ S-AIR‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ :S-AIR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﴍاء ﻫﺬﻩ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪ S-AIR‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ )ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻭاﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،S-AIR‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪) «S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ‪4 .......................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪4 .................. S-AIR‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ‪6 ......................‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﲡﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ‪13 .................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪18 ......................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪22 ......................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :4‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪36 ..................Quick Setup‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :5‬اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ‪39 .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‪41 .....................................‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪43 ............................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اذاﻋﺔ اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪43 ..............................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ‪86 ..................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪87 ...........................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪87 .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪88 ...............‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪88 ..............‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪91 ...........‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪92 ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪93 ....................‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪94 ...........................‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ‪101 .......................‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪102 ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﻢ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‪104 ............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ‪106 ............................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻭأزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪107 .................‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪111 ......................‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ‪114 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪44 ..................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‪50 ...........................‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪/‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪53 .....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪55 ...... JPEG‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪58 ................. DivX‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪60 ..............‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪60 ...........................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪62 ............................‬‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ‪71 ............‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ‪72 ..............................‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ‬
‫‪74 ......................... "BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪77 ..... DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪78 ............................S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ ‪84 .......‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ‪85 ...................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪(DVD-R DL‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫‪Super Audio‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻻﺻﺪار ‪ 1.1‬ﻭ ‪(2.0‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Audio CD‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫‪ (1MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ (2JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ (5(4(3DivX‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪Level 1/Level 2‬‬
‫‪ (6ISO 9660‬أﻭ ‪) Joliet‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻤﺘﺪة(‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/‬‬
‫‪ DVD+R/DVD+RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ (1MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫‪ (2JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (5(4(3DivX‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬
‫‪ (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) MP3 (1‬ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ .ISO/MPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﳚﺐ اﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﳚﺐ اﻥ ﺗﺘﲈﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ‪) .DCF‬اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪) "Design rule for Camera File system" DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا(‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﲑات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻭﺟﺪﻫﺎ اﻻﲢﺎد اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﲏ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪.((JEITA) Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DivX® (4‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.DivX, Inc.‬‬
‫‪ DivX (5‬ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎرات اﳌﺼﺎدﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ DivX Certified‬ﻭاﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲠﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ DivX, Inc.‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺘﴣ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (6‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻭاﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ ،CD-ROM‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ ‪) International Organization for Standardization) ISO‬اﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺣﻴﺪ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ((‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﻌﺎرات "‪"DVD-RW‬ﻭ"‪ "DVD+RW‬ﻭ "‪ "DVD+R‬ﻭ"‪ "DVD VIDEO‬ﻭ "‪ "CD‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD-ROM‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪PHOTO CD‬‬
‫• ﺟﺰء اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-Extra‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD Graphics‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD Audio‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪*DivX‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫ﻛﲈ اﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ(‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭرﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ أﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳊﺎﻻت‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪،CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺤﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ إذا ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD+RW/DVD+R‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﺗﻢ ﲣﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.Packet Write‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت )‪.(CD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﺸﻔﺮة ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﴍﻛﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻻاﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ذات ﻭﺟﻬﲔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻮﺟﻬﲔ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻮاد ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰا ﻷﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ اﳌﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪، (CD‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪Multi Session‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ Multi Session‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﰲ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ Multi Session‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ أﻭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻚ ﻫﺬا ﻋﲆ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﰲ اﳉﺰء اﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ، DVD VIDEO‬أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ]‪[Playback prohibited by area limitations.‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﻈﻮر ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ (.‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ إﺷﺎرة ﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﳏﻈﻮر ﹰا ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬ﻭأﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪ ﹰا ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﲈ أﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﳑﻴﺰات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬ﻭأﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﲈﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ ،Macrovision‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﳐﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭأﻏﺮاض اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﺧﺮ￯ اﳌﺤﺪﻭدة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .Macrovision‬ﻛﲈ ﳛﻈﺮ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات داﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby* Digital‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ )‪ Dolby Pro Logic (II‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.DTS** Digital Surround System‬‬
‫* ﻣﺼﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﺘﴫﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ دﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫"دﻭﻟﺒﻰ‚" "‪ ،"Pro Logic,‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ د ‪ -‬اﳌﺰدﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ دﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫** ﻣﺼﻨﻮع ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.DTS, Inc.‬‬
‫اﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "‪ "DTS Digital Surround"،"DTS‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.DTS, Inc.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
.(HDMITM) High-Definition Multimedia Interface ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻫﻲ اﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ اﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ‬High-Definition Multimedia Interface ‫ ﻭاﻟﻌﺒﺎرة‬HDMI ‫ ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎر‬HDMI ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
.HDMI Licensing LLC ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
.Sony Corporation ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ‬
‫" ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎر‬BRAVIA" ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة‬
.Sony Corporation ‫" ﻭﺷﻌﺎرﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬S-AIR" ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة‬
AR
9
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫إﺧﺮاج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﻮة‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) AM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) FM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AA‬‬
‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫أﻭ‬
‫•‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪،6‬‬
‫أﲪﺮ‪/‬أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‪/‬‬
‫أزرﻕ‪/‬ارﺟﻮاﲏ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫• اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬
‫)‪) (TDM-iP10‬ﻋﺪد ‪) (1‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫أﻭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) AM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪،6‬‬
‫أﲪﺮ‪/‬أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‪/‬أزرﻕ‪/‬‬
‫أرﺟﻮاﲏ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﻘﻮاﻋﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺎت اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫أﻏﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻛﺒﲑة‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ(‬
‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﻣﻘﺎس ‪(AA‬‬
‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫• اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) FM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻷﻋﻤﺪة )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﺻﻐﲑة( )ﻋﺪد ‪(6‬‬
‫)‪) (TDM-iP10‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪)(AA‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﺮاﻋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻷﻃﺮاﻑ اﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ ‬ﻭاﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﲑة اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﱰﻙ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ اﳊﺮارة أﻭ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﻱ ﳾء ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻻﺿﺎءة‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭث ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﺣﺘﲈﻝ اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﴪب ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‬
‫ﻭاﻟﺘﺄﻛﻞ اﻟﻨﺎﺷﺊ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫رﺑﻂ اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ اﱃ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ارﺑﻂ اﳊﺸﻴﺎت )ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( اﱃ ﻗﺎع ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺎدﻱ اﻧﺰﻻﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﲥﺎ اﻟﻮرﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﲡﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪ DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﲈ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫• ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪ ،2‬أﲪﺮ‪/‬أﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫• اﻷﻋﻤﺪة )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﻮاﻋﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺣﺎت اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫• أﻏﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬
‫• اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻛﺒﲑة‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ( )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬
‫• اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﺻﻐﲑة( )ﻋﺪد ‪(6‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ‪ ،SPEAKER‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.24‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﲈش ﻋﲆ اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﳉﺪار )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﻭاﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭاﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﳍﲈ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﲪﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ اﱃ اﲡﺎﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ( ﰲ ﳖﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺎع اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬
‫ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ارﺑﻂ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﱃ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻟﺸﻖ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ ﻭارﺑﻂ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻌﺸﻖ اﻟﺸﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﲈ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫اﳉﺰء اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫اﻟﱪﻏﻲ )ﺻﻐﲑ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﰲ اﻟﺸﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺰﻟﻴﻖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﱃ ﳖﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﻖ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻭاﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺴﻬﺎ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ اﱃ اﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﱪﻏﻴﲔ )ﻛﺒﲑﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭدﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻣﻊ أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ ‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﲪﺮ‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ارﺑﻂ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﱃ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻤﺤﺎذاة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﱪﻏﻴﲔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫اﻟﺸﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬
‫اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﺻﻐﲑة(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻤﺤﺎذاة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈرﺧﺎء اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ( ﻭاﺿﺒﻂ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳋﻄﻮط ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪ ،‬اﻣﺴﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮط‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈرﺧﺎء اﻟﱪﻏﻴﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أﻱ ارﲣﺎء ﰲ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أﻱ ارﲣﺎء ﰲ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺸﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪﻏﻴﲔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻛﺘﲈﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫)‪ :(R‬اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳊﻤﺮاء‬
‫أﲪﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯‬
‫)‪ :(L‬اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع )‪.(‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻗﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪر ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ )‪ (‬ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻗﺮب ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 5.0‬ﻣﱰ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ )‪.(‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 1.0‬اﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ )‪.(‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﲈ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫‪A A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯((‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯((‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ)‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ ‬ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪A A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﰲ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺷﺪﻳﺪة اﳊﺮارة أﻭ اﻟﱪﻭدة‬‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻏﺒﺎر أﻭ أﻭﺳﺎخ‬‫ ﺷﺪﻳﺪة اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰازات‬‫ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‬‫• ﺗﻮﺧﻰ اﳊﺬر ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭ‪/‬أﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺳﻄﺢ أرﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ )ﻣﺰﻳﺘﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﻤﻌﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺼﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﳋﺪﻭش أﻭ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ أﻱ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﻟﻜﺎﺷﻄﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ اﻟﻐﺴﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺤﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ أﻭ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻭ ﺗﺘﻜﺊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﴆ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻗﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (84‬ﻭ »ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(85‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳉﺪار‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺄﻃﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‪ :‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ :‬أﲪﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ :‬أﺧﴬ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‪ :‬أزرﻕ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ :‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯((‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯((‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ)‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ ‬ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﲑ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ‬
‫اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﺪار‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ 145‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ 145‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ‬
‫اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﲈدة اﳌﺼﻨﻮع ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﳉﺪار ﻭﻗﻮة ﲢﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰا ﻻﻥ اﳉﺪار اﳌﺼﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻮح اﳉﴢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺸ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺎرﺿﺔ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳉﺪار‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار ﻋﻤﻮدﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻮاد ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻠﱪاﻏﻲ أﻭ اﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺸﺎر ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﺻﻨﻊ اﳉﺪار أﻭ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﻰ ‪ Sony‬أﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ اﳊﻮادث أﻭ اﻻﺗﻼﻓﺎت اﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ أﻭ ﻗﻮة اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪار أﻭ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﱪاﻏﻲ أﻭ اﻟﻜﻮارث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﳐﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ادﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭاﻗﺮأ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬اﱃ ‪ ‬ﰲ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﻟﺪﻧﺪﻧﺔ ﻭاﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻊ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ارﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻻﺧﺮ￯ اﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ أﻭ ‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﳏﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻻﺷﺎرة‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ أﻭ ‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﳏﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻻﺷﺎرة‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯(‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻭاﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﳍﲈ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻳﺼﺎﳍﺎ اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﺒﻼت‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﺸﻂ ﻋﺎزﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪(+‬‬
‫اﻧﺒﻮب ﻣﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪(-‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ادﺧﻞ اﳌﻮﺻﻞ اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﺼﺪر ﻣﻨﻪ ﻃﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯( )أزرﻕ(‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪EA‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( )رﻣﺎدﻱ(‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪FE‬‬
‫‪OO‬‬
‫‪BW‬‬
‫‪SU‬‬
‫‪ER‬‬
‫‪NT‬‬
‫‪CE‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪EA‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪RL‬‬
‫‪SU‬‬
‫‪RR‬‬
‫‪SU‬‬
‫‪TL‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ)اﺧﴬ(‬
‫اﱃ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ)ارﺟﻮاﻧﻲ(‬
‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( )اﲪﺮ(‬
‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯( )اﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475 ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
ANTENNA
EZW-T100
SPEAKER
FM
COAXIAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
FRONT R
TV/VIDEO
SPEAKER
FRONT L
SUR R
SUR L
VIDEO
OUT
AM
TV/VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
DMPORT
HDMI OUT
CENTER SUBWOOFER
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PB/CB
Y
PR/CR
(‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﴪ￯( )أزرﻕ‬
R
KE
EA
SP
S
NT
ER
OF
WO
UB
ER
CE
R AUDIO IN L
DC5V
0.7A MAX
(‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( )رﻣﺎدﻱ‬
R
KE
EA
SP
RL
SU
(‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ)اﺧﴬ‬
SU
RR
TL
ON
FR
T
ON
FR
R
‫اﱃ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
(‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ)ارﺟﻮاﻧﻲ‬
(‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( )اﲪﺮ‬
(‫اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ)اﻟﻴﴪ￯( )اﺑﻴﺾ‬
AR
25
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻻﺟﺰاء ﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭاﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫)‪.(‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮص إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬اﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪) ‬ﻗﻴﺎﳼ( اﱃ ‪.(HDMI) ‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ أﻭ اﳌﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.(‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺒﴫﻱ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﳌﺘﺤﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻮر )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﲪﺮ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDE‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDE‬‬
‫‪L IN‬‬
‫‪DIGITA‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫أﻭ‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪EO‬‬
‫‪ENT VID‬‬
‫‪COMPON‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO IN‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) **HDMI‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(*‬
‫اﺧﴬ‬
‫ازرﻕ‬
‫اﲪﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺒﴫﻱ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﳌﺘﺤﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻮر )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﲪﺮ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDE‬‬
‫‪IN L‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDE‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO‬‬
‫‪L IN‬‬
‫‪DIGITA‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫أﻭ‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) **HDMI‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(*‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫اﺧﴬ‬
‫ازرﻕ‬
‫اﲪﺮ‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪T VIDEO‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪EN‬‬
‫‪COMPON‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO IN‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫* اذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ اﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭاﺿﺒﻂ اﺷﺎرة ﺧﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫** ‪(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﳎﻬﺰ ﹰا ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،HDMI‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭاﺧﱰ ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﳋﺮج )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ ،"DMPORT‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭ ‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج(‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺲ ‪ COAXIAL‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (.OPTICAL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺒﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ‪ PlayStation‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫)‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ (‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ )‪ PAL‬أﻭ ‪) (NTSC‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ‪ PAL‬أﻭ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻫﻲ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﺑﲔ ‪ PAL‬ﻭ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "NTSC‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻋﲆ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﺖ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‪ :‬‬
‫• اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ :DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺼﻐﲑ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪RT‬‬
‫‪DMPO‬‬
‫‪DC5VMAX‬‬
‫‪0.7A‬‬
‫اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ VCR‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.26‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺼﻐﲑ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﱃ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻖ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪) EZW-T100‬راﺟﻊ »اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻱ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.(31‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫*اﻟﱪاﻏﯽ‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪RT‬‬
‫‪DMPO‬‬
‫‪DC5VMAX‬‬
‫‪0.7A‬‬
‫اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.26‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺰع اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪) EZW-T100‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﺋﻲ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ TDM-iP10‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ .DMPORT‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) «DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(77‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﺋﻲ ‪ DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻼﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬اﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻱ‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪) S-AIR‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫»اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪) «S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬أﻭ راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﳎﻬﺰ ﹰا ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻞ ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﺷﺎرات اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﺷﺎرات اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻻﺷﺎرة‪:‬‬
‫اﺧﱰ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اذا ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳎﻬﺰ ﹰا ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻞ ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬
(‫ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‬AM ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
A
B
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
.‫( ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﰲ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬B) ‫( أﻭ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬A) ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
ANTENNA
SPEAKER
FM
COAXIAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
SPEAKER
TV/VIDEO
FRONT R
FRONT L
SUR R
SUR L
VIDEO
OUT
AM
•
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
TV/VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
Y
DMPORT
HDMI OUT
CENTER SUBWOOFER
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PB/CB
PR/CR
R AUDIO IN L
DC5V
0.7A MAX
ANTE
CO
NNA
FM ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
(‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‬
FM
75
AXIAL
‫أﻭ‬
AR
32
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
DAV-HDX276 ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) AM‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ )‪ (A‬أﻭ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ )‪ (B‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﰲ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪NNA‬‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ANTE‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪IAL 75‬‬
‫‪COAX‬‬
‫أﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬ﻭﺳﻠﻚ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﺻﻮت ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺻﺪﻭر‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،FM‬اﺟﻌﻠﻪ أﻓﻘﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﲡﺎﻩ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت ﺑﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.AM‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،FM‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر ‪ 75‬أﻭﻡ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲠﻮاﺋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﺳﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳉﺪارﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫اﱃ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DEMO‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DEMO ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DEMO OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﴍاﺋﻚ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬أﻭ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪"COLD‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪) "RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،((91‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :4‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫‪LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫‪OSD:‬‬
‫‪MENU:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO:‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE:‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪FRENCH‬‬
‫‪SPANISH‬‬
‫‪PORTUGUESE‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ادﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( أﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ اﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭاﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪, ‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎدﻱ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 4:3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [16:9‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎدﻱ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ اﱃ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪) "DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪[Press [ENTER] to run QUICK‬‬
‫]‪) SETUP.‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ‪ (.‬ﻋﲆ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (37‬ﻭأﻋﺪ اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫دﻭﻥ ادﺧﺎﻝ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻮع‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [4:3 LETTER BOX‬أﻭ ]‪[4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﰲ أﻣﺎﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌ ﹰﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(84‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪STANDARD‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ A.CAL MIC‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ أذﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷرﺟﻞ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( أﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎدﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ أﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳉﻬﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻱ ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪IC‬‬
‫‪AL M‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪IO I‬‬
‫‪AUD‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‬
‫اﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭث ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫أﻋﺪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ]‪.[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .Quick Setup‬ﻭﲠﺬا ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭاﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭج ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫ﰲ أﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮة‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ .‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(84‬‬
‫ﻭ»ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(85‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ أﻳﺔ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪.[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻫﺎدء ﹰا أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس أﻭ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ اﳉﻬﲑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ]‪ .[AUTO CALIBRATION‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ اﱃ‬
‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭاﳌﺠﺎﻭرﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ]‪ ،[AUTO CALIBRATION‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ ﻭﺟﻮدﻙ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس أﻭ إﺻﺪار ﺿﺠﻴﺞ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس )اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ‪ 3‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫)‪94( 99‬‬
‫)‪1( 1‬‬
‫‪0: 01 : 08‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫• ])‪ :[AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج‬
‫إﺳﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*1920 × 1080i‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*1280 × 720p‬‬
‫• ]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*720 × 480p‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪QUICK‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[QUICK‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick Setup‬‬
‫* ‪ :i‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫** ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺒﻠﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ × ‪[720‬‬
‫]‪.576p‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(26‬اﺧﱰ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬اﺧﱰ ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻘﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ اﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ؟‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﻮ اﺳﻠﻮب ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻻﺿﻄﺮاب ﻭﳚﻌﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺣﺎدة‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻻﺳﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﺎج إﱃ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ اﻻﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺂ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪"HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮر ﻏﲑ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪ [720 × 480p‬أﻭ × ‪[720‬‬
‫]‪ 576p‬ﻋﻤﻮدﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫])‪ (COMPONENT OUT‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ، [START‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت ‪ DVD‬أﻭ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪, ‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ اﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر –‪ ،FUNCTION +/‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "TUNER AM"  "TUNER FM"  "DVD‬‬
‫"‪…  "AUDIO"  "DMPORT"  "TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫"‪"DVD‬‬
‫"‪"TUNER FM‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫رادﻳﻮ ‪) FM/AM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(71‬‬
‫"‪/"TUNER AM‬‬
‫"‪"TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫"‪"DMPORT‬‬
‫"‪"AUDIO‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )أﻭ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA‬‬
‫‪) PORT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(77‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﳏﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫‪ AUDIO IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ اﺷﺎرات ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أﻭ‪،‬‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ اﺷﺎرات ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أﻭ‬
‫– ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :5‬اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﺲ ‪TV/VIDEO (AUDIO‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫)‪) IN‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج(( ﻭاﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫)‪ TV/VIDEO (COAXIAL‬أﻭ ‪TV/VIDEO (OPTICAL‬‬
‫)‪) DIGITAL IN‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة ‪"PRO‬‬
‫"‪ LOGIC‬أﻭ "‪ "PLII MOVIE‬أﻭ "‪."PLII MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.41‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ اﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "AUDIO.‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ‬
‫"‪."DEC. MODE‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻏﲑ "‪."A.F.D.STD‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﳛﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ TV/VIDEO‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ AUDIO IN‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺧﻠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻮﴍ "‪ "TV/VIDEO‬أﻭ "‪ "AUDIO‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "ATTENUATE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ATT ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ إدﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ATT OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮد اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ أﻭﺿﺎع ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة اﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﻭﺿﺎع ﺗﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻭاﻟﻨﺸﻂ اﳌﺮاﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮرة اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳌﺴﺎرح إﱃ ﺑﻴﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‬
‫"‪"A.F.D. STD‬‬
‫‪AUTO FORMAT‬‬
‫‪DIRECT‬‬
‫‪STANDARD‬‬
‫"‪"A.F.D. MULTI‬‬
‫‪AUTO FORMAT‬‬
‫‪DIRECT MULTI‬‬
‫"‪"PRO LOGIC‬‬
‫‪Dolby Pro Logic‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﲈ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻔﲑﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ )اﻟﻔﻨﺎﺗﲔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯( اﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﰐ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺘﲔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺘﲔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺘﻲ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻻﺷﺎرة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Pro Logic‬ﻭﳏﺎﻛﺎة ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‬
‫"‪"PLII MOVIE‬‬
‫‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬
‫‪MOVIE‬‬
‫"‪"PLII MUSIC‬‬
‫‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬
‫‪MUSIC‬‬
‫"‪"2CH STEREO‬‬
‫‪2 CHANNEL‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫"‪"HP 2CH‬‬
‫‪HEADPHONE‬‬
‫‪2 CHANNEL‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫"‪"HP VIRTUAL‬‬
‫‪HEADPHONE‬‬
‫‪VIRTUAL‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻻﺷﺎرة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Pro Logic II‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﲬﺴﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت ﺧﺮج ﺑﻌﺮض ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺮددﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭاﻻﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻻﺷﺎرة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Pro Logic II‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﲬﺴﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت ﺧﺮج ﺑﻌﺮض ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺮددﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﺎدر اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬أﻭ "‪ "2CH STEREO‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ "‪."DEC. MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ "‪"PROLOGIC‬ﻭ "‪"PLII MOVIE‬ﻭ "‪ "PLII MUSIC‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات ﺑﺚ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ "‪"PROLOGIC‬ﻭ "‪ "PLII MOVIE‬ﻭ"‪ "PLII MUSIC‬ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ إﺷﺎرات اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ ،"A.F.D. MULTI‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪"A.F.D.‬‬
‫"‪ STD‬أﻭ "‪ "PRO LOGIC‬أﻭ "‪ "PLII MOVIE‬أﻭ "‪."PLII MUSIC‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ ،S-AIR‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)‪(DUAL MONO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اذاﻋﺔ اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﻳﻌﺮض اﺷﺎرة اذاﻋﺔ اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫اﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪SOUND‬‬
‫‪MODE‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﲢﺘﺎج‬
‫اﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺒﴫﻱ أﻭ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﳌﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ أﻭ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اذاﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SOUND MODE‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫"‪ :"AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪ "MOVIE‬أﻭ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻹﺻﺪار ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"MOVIE‬ﳛﻘﻖ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"MUSIC‬ﳛﻘﻖ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪.‬‬
‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪،S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) S-AIR‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ AUDIO‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻻﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫"‪ :"MAIN‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"SUB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"MAIN+SUB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت ﳐﺘﻠﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ أﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺪة‪ .‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍات‪/‬‬
‫‪DISC 1-5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﳋﺎص ﺑﺮﻗﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪) "NO DISC‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ(‬
‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ »*‪) *DISC-1‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪.«(2-5 ،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫‪DISC SKIP‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎس ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪﻡ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻮة ﻋﻨﺪ إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ ‪ DISC‬اﳋﺎص ﲠﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺧﴬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت أﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪MUTING‬‬
‫–‪VOLUME +/‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪) DISC 1-5‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ( ﻭاﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪STEP‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت أﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DISC 1-5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪،"DVD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫"‪."DVD‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISC SKIP‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISC 1-5‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ‪VOLUME‬‬
‫–‪ +/‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻭ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ VOLUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬إﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ‬
‫‪) «"BRAVIA" Sync‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻷﺟﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.MUTING‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯ أﻭ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ VOLUME +‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪ /‬اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮة‬
‫ﻭاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻭاﺧﺮاج‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﰲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ "‪ "DEMO‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪) "OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻃﺎر ﺗﻠﻮ اﻻﺧﺮ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪(3‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISC 1-5‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "S-AIR STBY‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫‪ HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ PHONES‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪PHONES‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪) (.‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻷﺟﻞ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬أﻭ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ DISC 1-5‬ﻭاﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﳚﺎد ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺰر ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ اﻭ اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﴪﻳﻊ )اﺳﺘﻄﻼع(‪(2(1‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫"‪) "OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (81‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪DISC SKIP‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻟﻮﻥ اﳌﺆﴍات ‪ DISC 1-5‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ أﺧﴬ‪ :‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﳐﺘﺎرة‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬‫ اﻧﻄﻔﺎء‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﱄ‪ :‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﳏﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ اﳌﺆﴍ ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻭاﺣﺪة‬
‫ﰲ آﻥ ﻭاﺣﺪ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪(6(5(3‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة(‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪(7‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪‬أﻭ ‪ (4 ‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أﻭ ‪ (4 ‬اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﴎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ STEP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ STEP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﹰ ‪(8‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫)اﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض ﻓﻮرﻱ( اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮرﻱ( اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﴎﻋﺎت اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD ، DVD-RW ، DVD-R ، DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪ (5‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﰲ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.DVD-VR‬‬
‫‪ (6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ ،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (7‬ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (8‬ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R/DVD+RW/‬‬
‫‪ DVD+R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻮرﻱ أﻭ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻮرﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻐﲑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت أﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻧﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺸﲑ اﱃ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺆﴍات ‪ DISC 1-5‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳌﺪة ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﴤء‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍات ‪ DISC 1-5‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺆﴍات ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "ILLUM MODE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ILLUM ON‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ILLUM OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة ﻭاﻟﱰﲨﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ زﻭاﻳﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ )زﻭاﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة( ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ زاﻭﻳﺔ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ANGLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰاﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ زﻭاﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺮﲨﺎت ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺴﺐ رﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SUBTITLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".AVI‬أﻭ "‪ ".DIVX‬ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﻠﻒ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة‬
‫ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ‬
‫‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (*DivX‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PCM‬أﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬أﻭ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪،(DTS‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ، DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬أﻭ ‪ CD‬أﻭ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ‬
‫‪ ،DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ أﻭ‬
‫اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭاﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﻋﱪ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.Super Audio CD‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super VCD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﲣﺘﺎر ]‪ [2:STEREO‬أﻭ ]‪ [2:1/L‬أﻭ ]‪.[2:2/R‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻧﻮاع ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ]‪) [1: MAIN‬ﺻﻮت رﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫• ]‪) [1: SUB‬ﺻﻮت ﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫• ]‪) [1: MAIN+SUB‬ﺻﻮت رﺋﻴﴘ ﻭﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫• ]‪[2: MAIN‬‬
‫• ]‪[2: SUB‬‬
‫• ]‪[2: MAIN+SUB‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪ [2: MAIN‬ﻭ]‪ [2: SUB‬ﻭ]‪[2: MAIN+SUB‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺻﻮت ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/CD/‬‬
‫‪) DATA CD/‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪) DATA DVD/(MP3‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪(MP3‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ :[STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DATA/(DivX‬‬
‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺻﻴﻎ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‪ ،DTS‬اﻟﺦ( ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪5.1‬‬
‫‪LFE‬‬
‫)ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 .1‬‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪(L/R‬‬
‫‪1: ENGLISH‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪LFE‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪+ (L/R‬‬
‫‪LS‬‬
‫‪RS‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﻤﻮع ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫]‪ :[1: STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.1‬‬
‫]‪ :[1:1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 1‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1:2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ‪ 4‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﲑ إﱃ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ اﻥ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[2:STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.2‬‬
‫]‪ :[2:1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 2‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[2:2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪) 2‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 2 / 1‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯‬
‫)‪(L/R‬‬
‫‪1:SPANISH‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﻤﻮع ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪/(DivX‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ، HD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﳌﺮاد اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1:MP3‬‬
‫‪128k‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ ‪+‬‬
‫‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[MULTI/2CH‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MULTI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2CH‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super‬‬
‫‪ Audio CD‬ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ .CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪.[CD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SUPER AUDIO CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪.HD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HD‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "SA-CD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ .CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "CD‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MULTI/2CH‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[SUPER‬‬
‫]‪ AUDIO CD/CD LAYER‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ HD‬ﳐﺘﺎرة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) Super Audio CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪.[SUPER AUDIO CD‬‬
‫‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CD‬ﳐﺘﺎرة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ اﻭﺿﺎع اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة أﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎر ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﲣﺮج اﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪) PBC‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪(2.0‬‬
‫) ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪(PBC‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪) Playback Control) PBC‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة((‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺧﱰ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرﻙ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Press ENTER‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫زر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (ENTER‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬ﻛﻤﺆﴍ ]‪[Press SELECT‬‬
‫)اﺿﻐﻂ زر اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪ (SELECT‬ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫)اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ زر اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫"‪) "RESUME‬اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﳌﺎ‬
‫أﻧﻚ ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "RESUME‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻥ اﻟﺬﻱ أﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد )أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬‫‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﻭ اﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﲢﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪.FUNCTION +/‬‬
‫– ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺨﺼﻮص أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪Super Audio‬‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻭ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ ،DATA DVD‬ﺳﻴﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪.PBC‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة(‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﺘﻬﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻣﺮة ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﰲ اﳌﺮة اﻟﻘﺎدﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ذاﻛﺮة اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻭﻝ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪MULTI-DISC‬‬
‫‪ [RESUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ .[ON‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ»]‪) [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO/ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(«)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻧﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(68‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﻟﺰر –‪.FUNCTION +/‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪99‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎر ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[PROGRAM‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[SET ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[PROGRAM‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬
‫‪0: 00:00‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﱃ ﺻﻒ اﳌﺴﺎرات ]‪) [T‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.([01] ،‬‬
‫‪0: 00:00‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺑﺮﳎﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪.[02‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪ [02‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﲢﺖ‬
‫اﳊﺮﻑ ]‪ ،[T‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬
‫‪0: 03:51‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﺴﺎرات أﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮار اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪.5‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﺪء ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ ]‪ [ON‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮرا إﱃ أﻥ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﻭ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ » ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ«‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ أﻭ إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 5‬ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﱪﳎﺔ اﳉﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺬﻑ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‪ [--‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﲢﺖ اﳊﺮﻑ ]‪ ،[T‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ » ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ«‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮض ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫‪.MP3‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SHUFFLE‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[SHUFFLE‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪) DATA DVD/(*DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪(*DivX‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ])‪ : [ON (MUSIC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻻﻭﻝ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫• ]‪ :[ALL DISCS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ONE DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬
‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪ Super VCD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.PBC‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻭﺿﺎع اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺸﱰﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[REPEAT‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ALL DISCS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ONE DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD-VR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪(.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TITLE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ ﰲ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[CHAPTER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬
‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ALL DISCS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ONE DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [TRACK‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [FILE‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪ Super VCD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.PBC‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ زﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﲈ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ])‪ [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪) [IMAGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(56‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[TRACK‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [ORIGINAL‬اﻭ ]‪[PLAY LIST‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪/‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD TOP MENU‬أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ أﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[DISC MENU‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫]‪[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﱃ اﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﺼﻮر أﻭ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ إﺳﻢ »اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت«‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪.DVD TOP MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻭاﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-VR‬اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫]‪.[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[PLAY LIST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫إﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ]‪[ORIGINAL‬‬
‫ﻷﺟﻞ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ORIGINAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫أﺻ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﻨﹼﻒ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[DISC MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [MENU‬أﻭ ‪[TOP‬‬
‫]‪.MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD/DATA‬‬
‫‪ CD/DATA DVD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﳌﺴﺎر أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺮس أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت ﻭاﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫أﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪) . DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫‪ ،JPEG‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪[CHAPTER]:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ])**(**[ )ﻳﺸﲑ ** اﱃ رﻗﻢ(‪ .‬ﻳﺸﲑ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ اﱃ اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت‬
‫أﻭ اﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎرات أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺎرس أﻭ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﻭ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أﻭ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫)‪98( 99‬‬
‫)‪13( 99‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0 : 0 3: 1 7‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻹﳚﺎد اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﲔ ﻭ ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 0،2،0،1،2‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ )]‪.([2:10:20‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﺆﴍ ])**(**[ اﱃ ])**( ‪.[--‬‬
‫)‪98( 99‬‬
‫)‪13( 99‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0 : 03 : 1 7‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ازرار اﻻرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺼﻨﻒ‪ ،‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‪ ،‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪،‬‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اذا اﺧﻄﺄت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-‬‬
‫‪ (R/DVD-RW‬أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio‬‬
‫‪ (CD/CD‬أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ *((DivX‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ ،2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪[TIME‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ]**‪) [T **:**:‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﺆﴍ ]**‪ [T **:**:‬اﱃ ]‪.[T --:--:--‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TRACK LIST‬‬
‫‪03 In the Middle of Nowher...‬‬
‫* "‪) "Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا(‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪Japan‬‬
‫‪01_Geronimo_s_Cadillac‬‬
‫‪02_Riding_On_A_White_Swan‬‬
‫‪03_Give_Me_Peace_On_Earth‬‬
‫‪04_Sweet_Little_Shella‬‬
‫‪05_Ten_Thousand_Lonely_Drums‬‬
‫‪06_Lonely_Tears_In_Chinatown‬‬
‫‪07_In_Shaire‬‬
‫‪Electronics and Information Technology Industries‬‬
‫)‪.Association (JEITA‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎراﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺧﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".MP3‬أﻭ‬
‫"‪ ".JPG‬أﻭ "‪ ".JPEG‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP3‬‬
‫أﻭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻣﻊ أﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺻﺪﻭر ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺟﻬﲑة‪ .‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3PRO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ‬
‫ﳎﻠﺪات رﻗﻤﻬﺎ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪).200‬ﻭﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﻋﺪد‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﱃ ﳎﻠﺪ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫)ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪8‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 8‬ارﺗﻔﺎع((‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ آﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻭ ﳎﻠﺪ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪. RETURN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ‬
‫‪ .DATA DVD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬
‫)‪Let's Talk About Love (1985‬‬
‫)‪1st Album (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Middle of Nowhere (1986‬‬
‫)‪Ready for Romance (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Garden of Venus (1987‬‬
‫)‪Romantic Warriors (1987‬‬
‫)‪Back for Good (1988‬‬
‫)‪Alone (1999‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪:JPEG‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪) ".MP3‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ (MP3‬أﻭ‬
‫"‪)".JPG"/".JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪(JPEG‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪*DCF‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD‬‬
‫أﻭ ‪ .DATA DVD‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﻨﹼﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬
‫)‪Let's Talk About Love (1985‬‬
‫)‪1st Album (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Middle of Nowhere (1986‬‬
‫)‪Ready for Romance (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Garden of Venus (1987‬‬
‫)‪Romantic Warriors (1987‬‬
‫)‪Back for Good (1988‬‬
‫)‪Alone (1999‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. PICTURE NAVI‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﰲ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﲥﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 90‬درﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[JPEG‬‬
‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬‬
‫]‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ PICTURE NAVI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ])‪ [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪.[MUSIC‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ آﺧﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[BROWSING‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[BROWSING‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬اﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‪/‬ﳎﻠﺪ ‪ «MP3‬أﻭ‬
‫»اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‪/‬ﳎﻠﺪ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.«JPEG‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[PICTURE LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ‪ 16‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮة ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ أﻭ ﳎﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.«JPEG‬‬
‫‪.RETURN‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدﻱ ﻋﲆ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻌﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﻮ )ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ أﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫])‪[MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫])‪.IMAGE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MUSIC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[IMAGE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﻮ )ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﻮ )ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪[EFFECT‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻌﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ ﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[INTERVAL‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ]‪.[INTERVAL‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳋﻴﺎر اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ أﻭ‬
‫أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[JPEG RESOLUTION‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ]‪) [HDMI SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ ،PICTURE NAVI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [MUSIC‬ﳐﺘﺎر ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﻜﺒﲑة اﳊﺠﻢ‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬا ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ أﻭ أﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﻇﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪[MODE (MUSIC,‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﳌﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FAST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[NORMAL‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[NORMAL‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[SLOW 1‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪.[EFFECT‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MODE 1‬ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺪرﳚﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫أﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﱃ أﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MODE 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺎر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﱃ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MODE 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MODE 4‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MODE 5‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪[JPEG‬‬
‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ × ‪[(1920‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪ 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫®‪DivX‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة‬
‫ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ‪ DivX‬ﺗﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .DivX, Inc.‬ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﺎدﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ DivX® Certified‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫رﺳﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪.DivX‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﳜﻀﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-ROM/CD-R/) DATA CD‬‬
‫‪ (CD-RW‬أﻭ‪DVD-ROM/DVD-R/) DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪ (DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﴩﻭط‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ ﻣﺴﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬‬
‫أﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻭاﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.(UDF) Universal Disk Format‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻼت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".AVI‬أﻭ "‪ .".DIVX‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".AVI‬أﻭ "‪ ".DIVX‬إذا ﱂ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﻣﺰج اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﻲ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺠﻤﻪ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ‪720‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( أﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ أﻭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻏﲑ ﻭاﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ أدﻧﻰ‪ .‬إذا ﻇﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﻫ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻮﴅ ﲠﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪(Windows Media Audio) WMA‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻈﻬﻮر اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪. DivX‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫إدراج اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.Packet Write‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪SUMMER 2003‬‬
‫‪NEW YEAR'S DAY‬‬
‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬راﺟﻊ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) «DivX‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. /‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪد اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻌﺪد اﳌﺮات اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ«‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪FILE LIST‬‬
‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬
‫‪HAWAII 2004‬‬
‫‪VENUS‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. /‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ اﻷﻭﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫]‪.[A/V SYNC‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﻭ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻮد اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻘﻴﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺪﻓﻖ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫إذا ﱂ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫‪Enter a new 4-digit password,‬‬
‫‪then press ENTER .‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺳﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ]‪ [LEVEL‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.11‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺖ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ]‪PARENTAL‬‬
‫‪ [CONTROL‬ﳍﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪USA‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت أﻭ أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪STANDARD:‬‬
‫‪CHANGE PASSWORD:‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[STANDARD‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳉﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ]‪ ،[LEVEL‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻨﻮد اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[STANDARD‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[OTHERS ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻭإدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ »ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻨﻮد اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ]‪.[LEVEL‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ]‪PARENTAL‬‬
‫‪.[CONTROL‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﲈ أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد أﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪PARENTAL‬‬
‫‪ ،[CONTROL‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮد اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﱃ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮار‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 7‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ .(60‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "199703‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ أﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬
‫اﳉﺪﻳﺪة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺼﺺ إﻟﻴﻪ اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬
‫]‪ [CHANGE PASSWORD ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة رﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ارﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ]‪) [VIDEO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫]‪) [HDMI SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪) [AUDIO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(66‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ]‪) [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪) [SPEAKER SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪[VIDEO SETUP] :‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ]‪[TV TYPE‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪AUDIO FOLLOW‬‬
‫]‪) [OSD‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫اﳋﻴﺎرات‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ إﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(36‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ ،[SETUP‬راﺟﻊ »إﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫]‪[LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTERFULL‬‬
‫‪BOX‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪4:3 PAN AUTO‬‬
‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫‪OSD:‬‬
‫‪MENU:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO:‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE:‬‬
‫]‪)[MENU‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [AUDIO‬اﻟﺼﻮت( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ORIGINAL‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳍﺎ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [SUBTITLE‬اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[AUDIO FOLLOW‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺴﲈر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬أﻭ ]‪ [AUDIO‬أﻭ ]‪ ،[SUBTITLE‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺣﺪ￯‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [OTHERS ‬ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻭ]‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ،[SUBTITLE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭإدﺧﺎﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ »ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪[VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL:‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫]‪)[TV TYPE‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[16:9‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ON‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [ON‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ، [START‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫]‪ :[4:3 PAN SCAN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺺ اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻏﲑ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ :[4:3 LETTER BOX‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﴍﻳﻄﲔ ﻋﲆ أﻋﲆ ﻭأﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ])‪ [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT‬ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫]‪[4:3 OUTPUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ‪ ،16:9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺷﺎرات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ‪ .4:3‬إذا ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[FULL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﴩﻳﻂ اﻷﺳﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭاﻷﻳﴪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [4:3 PAN SCAN‬أﻭ اﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫])‪[PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻫﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ اﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ؟« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [4:3 OUTPUT‬ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ]‪ [TV TYPE‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪.[16:9‬‬
‫])‪[COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ‬
‫اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪.CD‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ PAL‬أﻭ‬
‫‪ NTSC‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،DUAL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫]‪ :[PAL‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭإﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫]‪ :[NTSC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ PAL‬ﻭإﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫اﻷﻫﺪاﻑ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻮرة دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪) [BLACK LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺴﻮاد(‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد )ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﳋﺮج‬
‫اﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT/HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫])‪) [BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮاد )ﺧﺮج اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ((‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻞ اﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد )ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﳋﺮج‬
‫اﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO‬‬
‫‪.OUT‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺳﻮاد اﺷﺎرة اﳋﺮج اﱃ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺳﻮداء ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ]‪) [PAUSE MODE‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻫﺪاﻑ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻮرة دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ إﺷﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[FRAME‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ اﳋﺎص ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(28‬‬
‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪LEVEL2‬‬
‫‪YCBCR‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬
‫‪VOLUME LIMIT:‬‬
‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‪ .HDMI OUT‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪«HDMI OUT‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫])‪ :[AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*1920 × 1080i‬‬
‫]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*1280 × 720p‬‬
‫]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*720 × 480p‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ :i‬اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫** ﻭﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺒﻠﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة × ‪[720‬‬
‫]‪.576p‬‬
‫]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪) «"BRAVIA" Sync‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [ON‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ]‪Please verify the‬‬
‫‪) [HDMI connection.‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ (.HDMI‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫•‬
‫]‪[VOLUME LIMIT‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر *‪ ،THEATER/THEATRE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(76‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﺟﻬﲑ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﻫﺬا ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[LEVEL3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.10‬‬
‫]‪ :[LEVEL2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.15‬‬
‫]‪ :[LEVEL1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.20‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫])‪[YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻹﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[YCBCR‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.YCBCR‬‬
‫]‪ :[RGB‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.RGB‬‬
‫]‪[JPEG RESOLUTION‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫] ‪ :[SD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ﻣﻊ اﻻﻃﺎر‬
‫اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ :[HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪HD‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻻﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫اﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫] ‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻹﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ إﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [JPEG RESOLUTION‬ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[TV‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [YCBCR‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪.[RGB‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ ،DVI‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ]‪ [RGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫]‪.[YCBCR‬‬
‫])‪[AUDIO (HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ ‪ PCM‬ﺑـ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 24/‬ﺑﺖ اﱃ اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪ PCM‬ﺑـ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﱰﺗﺰ‪16/‬‬
‫ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [ON‬ﳐﺘﺎر ﹰا‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ]‪[AUDIO DRC‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻭ‪ DYNAMIC BASS‬ﻭ"‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ أﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ ،"DVD‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ TYPE‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪ [16:9‬ﻭ]‪ [HDMI RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪[HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [720 × 480p‬أﻭ ]‪.[720 × 576p‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ] ‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ‬
‫]‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[1920 × 1080i‬‬
‫‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ‪[(1920‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫]‪ ،× 1080i) HD‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﻮداء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬إﺧﺮاج اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪ DATA DVD‬اﱃ‬‫ﳖﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫]‪[AUDIO SETUP‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SETUP‬‬
‫‪S-AIR SETUP:‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION:‬‬
‫‪AUTO CALIBRATION:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO DRC:‬‬
‫‪TRACK SELECTION:‬‬
‫]‪[S-AIR SETUP‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ‪ .S-AIR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪) «S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫]‪[ID‬‬
‫]‪[PAIRING‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) S-AIR‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﳏﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫أﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(84‬‬
‫]‪[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(85‬‬
‫]‪) [AUDIO DRC‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﰲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ أﻱ ﻣﺪ￯ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[STANDARD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MAX‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [TRACK SELECTION‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ أﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻋﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )‪ PCM‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.(MPEG‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ‪[TRACK‬‬
‫]‪ SELECTION‬ﻋﲆ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪ [AUDIO‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻓﯽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) .(63‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫أذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬ﲠﺬا اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫]‪[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪SCREEN SAVER:‬‬
‫‪JACKET PICTURE‬‬
‫‪BACKGROUND:‬‬
‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL:‬‬
‫‪Registration Code‬‬
‫‪DivX:‬‬
‫‪MULTI-DISC RESUME:‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪RESET:‬‬
‫]‪[SCREEN SAVER‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ )ﻇﻬﻮر‬
‫اﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ اﳌﺰﻭدة ﻟﻠﺼﻮر(‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ أﻱ زر )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ (‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻔﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إذا ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳌﺪة ‪ 15‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[BACKGROUND‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﻭ ﺻﻮرة اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[JACKET PICTURE‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ )ﺻﻮرة‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )‪ ،CD-EXTRA‬اﻟﺦ(‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪.[GRAPHICS‬‬
‫]‪ :[GRAPHICS‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[BLUE‬ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أزرﻕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[BLACK‬ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻮد اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫]‪[DivX‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳋﺎص ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻻﻧﱰﻧﺖ‬
‫‪.http://www.divx.com‬‬
‫]‪) [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫]‪ [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 10‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﻨﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[RESET‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮ￯ ]‪ [SETUP‬ﻏﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫]‪[SPEAKER SETUP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﲥﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻭﺗﻮازﻥ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [SPEAKER SETUP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪.‬‬
‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER SETUP‬‬
‫‪CONNECTION:‬‬
‫‪DISTANCE(FRONT):‬‬
‫‪DISTANCE(SURROUND):‬‬
‫‪LEVEL(FRONT):‬‬
‫‪LEVEL(SURROUND):‬‬
‫‪TEST‬‬
‫‪TONE‬‬
‫‪FRONT:‬‬
‫‪CENTER:‬‬
‫‪SURROUND:‬‬
‫‪SUBWOOFER:‬‬
‫]‪) [CONNECTION‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‬
‫إذا ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻭ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[CENTER‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ .[SURROUND‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﳖﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[FRONT‬‬
‫]‪[YES‬‬
‫]‪[CENTER‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NONE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SURROUND‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NONE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫]‪[YES‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[CONNECTION‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ]‪ [STANDARD‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫]‪ ،[SPEAKER FORMATION‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪ [SPEAKER FORMATION‬اﱃ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ]‪.[STANDARD‬‬
‫])‪) [DISTANCE (FRONT‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ )اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ((‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﲑات اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ )‪ (‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﺎراﻣﱰ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.0‬اﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0‬اﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ‪ (2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :(2(3 3.0 m [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫اﱃ ‪ 5.0‬ﻣﱰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫]‪ :(3 3.0 m [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :(4(3 3.0 m [CENTER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫اﱃ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0.9 (1‬اﱃ ‪ 6.9‬ﻣﱰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻨﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0.0 (2‬اﱃ ‪ 6.0‬ﻣﱰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻨﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت أﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪) Quick Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(36‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [CENTER‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬
‫])‪) [DISTANCE (SURROUND‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ )ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ((‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﲑات اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ)‪ (‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺘﻐﲑات ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0‬اﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ ‪.(1‬‬
‫• إذا ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ أﻗﺮب‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ إﺷﺎرات اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.0 (1‬اﱃ ‪ 6.9‬ﻣﱰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪) Quick Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(36‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [SURROUND‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬
‫])‪) [LEVEL (FRONT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮت )اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :0.0 dB [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :*0.0 dB [CENTER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :0.0 dB [SUBWOOFER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﳎﻬﺎر‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [CENTER‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬
‫])‪) [LEVEL (SURROUND‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫]‪ :*0.0 dB [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [SURROUND‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬
‫]‪)[TEST TONE‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ])‪ [LEVEL (FRONT‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ])‪.[LEVEL (SURROUND‬‬
‫]‪ : [OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪ ،[SPEAKER SETUP‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ اﻥ ﲣﺘﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﲔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬اﱃ‪. 3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪.OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻣﻌ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮص‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ VOLUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻭ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ VOLUME +/‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ .CLEAR‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ اﱃ اﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[CONNECTION‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻮد اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 20‬ﳏﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻭ‪ 10‬ﳏﻄﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ AM‬ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪FM 10 : 88.00 MHz‬‬
‫‪SONY RADIO‬‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ "‪"TUNER AM‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر –‪ TUNING +/‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﺒﺪأ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬إﱃ ‪ 7‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳏﻄﺎت أﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪) "COMPLETE‬اﻛﺘﲈﻝ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ( ﰲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫أﻋﺪ اﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.2‬‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ﻭذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭاﻟﴩﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﱰدد ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ أﻭ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،AM‬ﻗﻢ أﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺎﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳏﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،AM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﳏﻄﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮار ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "TUNED‬ﻭ"‪) "ST‬ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "MEMORY‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ اﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ )راﺟﻊ»ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.((71‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ "‪"TUNER AM‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ PRESET +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷ ﹰﺎ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺚ ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ ،‬إﻻ أﻥ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺤﺴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫ﳏﻄﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫–‪.VOLUME +/‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﳏﻄﺎت رادﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر–‪ TUNING +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر–‪ TUNING +/‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﳏﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫–‪ TUNING +/‬أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺮدداﲥﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ اﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ "‪ "TUNER AM‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.D.TUNING‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ازرار اﻻرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﱰددات‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "FM MODE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ "‪."MONO‬‬
‫• "‪ :"STEREO‬اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"MONO‬اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﺳﲈء )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ("XYZ" ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎﻝ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ إﺳﻢ ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﳏﻄﺔ‬
‫ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ "‪"TUNER AM‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ PRESET +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء إﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﻮس اﳋﺎص ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "NAME IN‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻹﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط‪:‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳊﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﱃ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫إدﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭأرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭرﻣﻮز أﺧﺮ￯ ﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"FM1 87.50‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ "‪"FM MODE‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ "‪"STEREO‬‬
‫"‪"TUNER AM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﳊﺮﻭﻑ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭرﻣﻮز أﺧﺮ￯ ﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳊﺮﻑ‬
‫اﳌﺮاد إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳊﺮﻑ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﳊﺮﻑ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫اﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳊﺮﻑ اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "COMPLETE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"SONY RADIO‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"AM1 576‬‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫إذا ارﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮط‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻏﲑ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"AM1 576‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺜﻮاﲏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ أﻭ اﻟﱰدد ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ ،"TUNER AM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﱰدد اﳌﻌﺮﻭض‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،DISPLAY‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪... ...   ‬‬
‫"‪"TUNER FM‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"SONY RADIO‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"FM1 87.50‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ "‪"FM MODE‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ "‪"STEREO‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/ HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ "BRAVIA" Sync‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪Sony‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﲈ‬
‫ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(75‬‬‫‪ -‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(75‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(75‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(76‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(76‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺸﱰﻛﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪(Consumer Electronics Control) CEC‬‬
‫ﻷﺟﻞ ‪.(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﰲ اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻷزرار اﳌﻔﻴﺪة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ *‪ THEATER/THEATRE‬أﻭ‬
‫‪ ONE-TOUCH PLAY‬أﻭ ‪.TV ‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (86‬ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ONE-TOUCH‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪THEATER‬‬
‫‪BRAVIA Sync‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ .HDMI‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﺼﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪- HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إدﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ]‪[Please verify the HDMI connection.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،(.HDMI‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح(‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر *‪.THEATER/THEATRE‬‬
‫*‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ زر ﻭاﺣﺪ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،ONE-TOUCH PLAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DVD TOP MENU/DVD MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻬﻮر اﳌﺆﴍ ‪ ‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "DVD‬ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬‫–‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ اﳌﺆﴍ ‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﻭاﳌﺆﴍ ‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬إذا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ اﱃ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪.HDMI ."DVD‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﳛﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤ ﹰﺎ ﻭ‪[CONTROL FOR‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲤﺮ ﻓﱰة ﻭﺟﻴﺰة ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰاﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ زر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ POWER‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪ TV ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪"TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫ﳐﺘﺎرة أﻭ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،(CD‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﻟﺼﺎدر‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻭاﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪ ."TV/VIDEO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺎدر ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪"TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ أﻳﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫"‪ ،"TV/VIDEO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳌﺪة ﻭﺟﻴﺰة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) PAP‬ﺻﻮرة ﻭﺻﻮرة(‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،PAP‬ﺗﻌﻮد ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.PAP‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪ "TV/VIDEO‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ رﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫)ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر *‪ THEATER‬أﻭ *‪ ،THEATRE‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﺟﻬﲑ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﻫﺬا ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ "]‪) "[VOLUME LIMIT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫*‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪ TDM-iP10‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA‬‬
‫‪.PORT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ،DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮر أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﳋﺎص‬
‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،TDM-BT1‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻜﲇ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،TDM-NC1‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DMPORT‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺼﺎدرة‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫أﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬ﻷﺟﻞ "‪"DEC. MODE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(41‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪"A.F.D.‬‬
‫"‪.STD‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ،DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻷزرار اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻭ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻳﺸﲑ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ اﱃ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﻷزرار اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫)‪ (DMPORT‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﻧﻘﺎﻝ أﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﺘﻮر‪ .‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪ ،MEDIA PORT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎت ‪ DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻭﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫)*‪) (TDM-iP10‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﻏﲑ‬
‫اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ TDM-iP10‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪ ،MEDIA PORT‬راﺟﻊ »ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) «MEDIA PORT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(30‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (105‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﴍاء اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪ ،S-AIR‬ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪) S-AIR‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة(‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﺣﺪات رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪) .S-AIR‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪد‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ :S-AIR‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،S-AIR‬ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳉﺪارﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﳌﺲ أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﻭاﻓﺼﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺸﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺸﻖ‬
‫ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ :S-AIR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ‬‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-T10‬‬
‫‪EZW‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪(S-AIR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫• اﻧﺰع اﻟﱪﻏﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺸﻖ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻧﺰع اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺸﻖ ﻓﻴﲈ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-T10‬‬
‫‪EZW‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ(‬
‫إدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪ S-AIR‬ﻣﺘﺠﻬ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻋﲆ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﳏﺎذاة‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة ﻏﲑ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺸﻖ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪.EZW-T100‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ANTENNA‬‬
‫‪EZW-T100‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪FRONT L‬‬
‫‪FRONT R‬‬
‫‪TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫‪R AUDIO IN L‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪W-T‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫‪EZ‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز إرﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬اﺳﺘﺒﻘﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز إرﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ ،S-AIR‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)ﲥﻴﺌﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪(ID‬‬
‫ﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫]‪.SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪،[S-AIR SETUP ‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫‪DMPORT‬‬
‫‪DC5V‬‬
‫‪0.7A MAX‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪CENTER SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﳏﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[S-AIR SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ID‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻱ رﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ A) ID‬أﻭ ‪ B‬أﻭ ‪.(C‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪.ID‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ ،S-AIR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬آﺧﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪ID B‬‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(79‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ،S-AIR‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪ID B‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 7‬اﻟﻮاردة‬
‫أﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(81‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ])‪ [(PAIRING‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪.ID‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﳉﲑاﻥ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻚ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ أﻧﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﲑاﻥ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ أرﻗﺎﻡ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﳌﻨﻊ ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺤﺪدة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ .S-AIR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ S-AIR‬ﰲ أﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ ،S-AIR‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬أﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ID‬‬
‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﻭﺣﺪة ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫أﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .S-AIR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺤﺪدة )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ(« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(81‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ S-AIR MODE‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،S-AIR MODE‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫• "‪ :"PARTY‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﺈﺻﺪار‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"SEPARATE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "PARTY‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر –‪) FUNCTION +/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "SEPARATE‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫"‪"TUNER  "TUNER FM"  "MAIN UNIT‬‬
‫"‪... "AUDIO"  "DMPORT"  AM‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫"‪."MAIN UNIT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ "‪"TUNER AM‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﳐﺘﺎر ﹰا ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ .S-AIR‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "TUNER FM‬أﻭ‬
‫"‪."TUNER AM‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪، ، ،‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪S-AIR CH‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-‬‬
‫‪ AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪"S-AIR‬‬
‫"‪ STBY‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪."ON‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "S-AIR STBY‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد أﻭ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "S-AIR STBY‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫"‪ ،"ON‬ﻳﺰداد اﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ‪"S-AIR‬‬
‫"‪ STBY‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ ،"ON‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫"‪) "S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ (S-AIR‬أﻭ ﻳﴤء )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ (S-AIR‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭ"‪ "S-AIR STBY‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ ،"ON‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻐﻠﻖ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳏﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪."S-AIR STBY‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "S-AIR STBY‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪ "OFF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺰع ﺟﻬﺎز إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺤﺪدة )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﳉﲑاﻥ ﺻﻮت ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ،ID‬أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ أﻧﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﲑاﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪S-‬‬
‫‪ AIR‬اﳌﺤﺪدة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪) ID‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﳉﺎر‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻏﺮﻓﺘﻚ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫اﳉﺎر‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎﻝ أﻳﺔ‬
‫إﺷﺎرة‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻏﺮﻓﺘﻚ‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺮاد اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻧﺰع ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﻋﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(79‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ،S-AIR‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫]‪.SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪،[S-AIR SETUP ‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﳏﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[S-AIR SETUP‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[PAIRING‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[YES‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫‪ID A‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة )اﻟﻮﺣﺪات( اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻟﻠﺬاﻥ ﺗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪأ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[NO‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.10‬‬
‫ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ .[YES‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[NO‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﳖﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[YES‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﻟﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة«‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻔﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﺴﺘﻤﻌﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "RF CHANGE‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪ ،"OFF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ID‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت أﻛﺜﺮ اﺳﺘﻘﺮار ﹰا‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(79‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳏﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪."RF CHANGE‬‬
‫• ﰲ أﻏﻠﺐ اﻻﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "RF CHANGE‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪،"OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ إﺣﺪ￯ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :S-AIR ID A‬اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪ :S-AIR ID B‬اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 6‬ﻣﻦ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪ :S-AIR ID C‬اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 11‬ﻣﻦ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻗﻨﺎة )ﺗﺮدد(‬
‫إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ آﺧﺮ )أﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻵﺧﺮ )اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﺮ￯(‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ S-AIR‬اﻷﺧﺮ￯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(81‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪.ID‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫])‪ [(PAIRING‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭض ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪.ID‬‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪ "OFF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎة أﻓﻀﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ أﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮددﻫﺎ ‪ 2.4‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت ‪ S-AIR‬أﻭ‬
‫أﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲢﺴﲔ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪"RF‬‬
‫"‪.CHANGE‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "RF CHANGE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"AUTO‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﺎدة‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪"RF‬‬
‫"‪ CHANGE‬اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "ON‬أﻭ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫]‪[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ أﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[AUDIO SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫]‪ ،[SPEAKER FORMATION‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[AUDIO SETUP‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫]‪.[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫‪STANDARD‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[STANDARD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NO CENTER‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NO SURROUND‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FRONT ONLY‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ALL FRONT‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ALL FRONT – NO CENTER‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [YES‬أﻭ ]‪ ، [NO‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[YES‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﱃ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪[AUTO‬‬
‫]‪ .CALIBRATION‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪7‬‬
‫اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(85‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NO‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﳖﺎء ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ‪[SPEAKER‬‬
‫]‪.FORMATION‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ‪[SPEAKER‬‬
‫]‪ FORMATION‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪[AUTO‬‬
‫]‪) CALIBRATION‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(85‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ]‪ [CONNECTION‬ﰲ‬
‫]‪) [SPEAKER SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(68‬ﺗﻌﻮد ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪ [SPEAKER FORMATION‬اﱃ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬
‫]‪.[STANDARD‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫‪IC‬‬
‫‪LM‬‬
‫‪Digital Cinema Auto) D. C. A. C.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻌﻴﺎرة‬
‫‪) Calibration‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪/ A.C‬‬
‫‪O IN‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪AUD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرة ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪.[AUTO CALIBRATION‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻋﺮ اﻫﺘﲈﻡ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻻﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭاﳉﲑاﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮاس ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[AUDIO SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫]‪.SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪،[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.[CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( اﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ A.CAL MIC‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻷذﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷرﺟﻞ ‪،‬اﻟﺦ‪).‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ أﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳚﺐ أﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻫﺎدﺋﺄ اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎس‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ]‪،[AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺒ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪) .‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ ﻭﺟﻮدﻙ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﻭإﺻﺪار ﺿﻮﺿﺎء أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس )‪ 3‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ ذﻟﻚ اﱃ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس‪.‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫• إذا ﻇﻬﺮت رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﲑ اﱃ ﺧﻄﺄ ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻌﻢ ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [YES‬أﻭ ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﺟﻴﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫اﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﱰ ]‪ .[YES‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﺟﻴﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻌﻢ ]‪ [YES‬ﻹﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﳌﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺿﻐﻂ أﻱ زر‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ أﻭ ﻧﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ*‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬‫* اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﳋﺎص ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫]‪ [SUBWOOFER‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ]‪ [YES‬داﺋ ﹰﲈ ﻻﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﻭﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.68‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )اﳌﺼﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫اﻷزرار )ﻏﲑ اﻷزرار ‪ TV ‬ﻭ*‪THEATER/THEATRE‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ TV INPUT‬ﻭ–‪ (TV VOL +/‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷزرار‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺼﺎدر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV ‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪THEATER‬‬
‫)‪(THEATRE‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV INPUT‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر –‪TV VOL +/‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر –‪*TV CH +/‬‬
‫)–‪(*PROG +/‬‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ*‪،‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪*ENTER *-/--‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻭ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪*TOOLS‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪*RETURN‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪*MENU‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪*MUTING‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪،*‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷزرار ﻣﻊ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪ TV‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱰددات‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DYNAMIC BASS‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻡ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة‬
‫أﻭ ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SLEEP‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "D. BASS ON‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،SLEEP‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )اﳌﺪة‬
‫اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﺑﻤﺘﻐﲑات ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DYNAMIC BASS‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ اﳊﻮار ﻛﲈ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﴪح أﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﳌﻴﺰة ﻣﻔﻴﺪة ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة أﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.NIGHT‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "NIGHT ON‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺆﺛﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫"‪ "SLEEP OFF‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ .Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪"NIGHT‬‬
‫"‪ ON‬ﳐﺘﺎر ﹰا‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻭﺿﺢ ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ اﻟﻜﻼﻡ )اﳊﻮار ﰲ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( ﺳﻬﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻭ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ NIGHT‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫"‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﺑﻤﺘﻐﲑات ‪10‬‬
‫دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ازرار اﻻرﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺣﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DIMMER‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻄﻮع‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DIMMER OFF‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DIMMER ON‬ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪...  ...   ‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮاﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ ﻭاﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/(PBC‬‬
‫‪Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﻟﻔﻬﺮس*‬
‫*‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺺ اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫‪ ‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪) DATA DVD/(MP3‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪(MP3‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭرﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ(*‬
‫*‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1‬ﻭ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ID3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DATA/(DivX‬‬
‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪(PBC‬‬
‫• **‪**:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة‪/(PBC‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ ‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻭرﻗﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫• **‪T **:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻨﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/‬‬
‫• **‪T-**:‬‬
‫‪Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،PBC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫• **‪D-**:‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪DATA DVD/(MP3‬‬
‫)اﳌﻠﻒ ‪(MP3‬‬
‫• **‪T **:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DATA/(DivX‬‬
‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫• **‪**:**:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1: 01: 40‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﳌﺪة‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫• **‪D **:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﳌﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻭأﻧﻮاع اﳌﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬
‫• **‪T **:**:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫• **‪T-**:**:‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺒﺘﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫• **‪C **:**:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻣﺜﻞ إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﱂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "*" ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ *DivX‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈر اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﻋﺪد ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﳏﺪﻭدة ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﲨﻴﻊ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ اﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻧﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺺ اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/Super Audio‬‬
‫‪.CD/CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD/Super Audio CD/CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫اﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪"NO‬‬
‫"‪.TEXT‬‬
‫• **‪C-**:**:‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪*Exif‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪Dvorak/Tchaikovsky /NedPho/Kreizberg‬‬
‫‪Adagio - Allegro molto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻧﺺ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪((3DivX‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ ،CD/DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)ﻛﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﱄ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪DATA CD JPEG‬‬
‫(‪5‬‬
‫)‪8‬‬
‫)‪10( 15‬‬
‫‪9/ 18/ 2002‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪192k MP3‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪0: 13‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫*‬
‫"‪) "Exchangeable Image File Format‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ( ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪Japan Electronics and‬‬
‫‪.(JEITA) Information Technology Industries Association‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫• اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ]‪.[MM/DD/YYYY‬‬
‫‪ :MM‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪ :DD‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ :YYYY‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫• ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2002_Remixes‬‬
‫‪Soul_Survivor_rap_version‬‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/(2 MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬‫‪ MP3‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض إﺳﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪1.0/1.1‬و ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ID3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﺎراﻣﻴﱰ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪[SYSTEM‬‬
‫]‪ ،SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [RESET‬ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [NO‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺜﻮاﲏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﻛﺘﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻷزرار ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "COLD RESET‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻭ]‪ [MULTI1/2CH‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ])‪ [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﻭ]‪[INTERVAL‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪) [SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (62‬اﱃ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ‪[PARENTAL‬‬
‫]‪.CONTROL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬
‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﰲ اﳉﺪار ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ اﳊﺮارة ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﻨ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬا ﻋﲆ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﳌﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﻳﺆدﻱ اﱃ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺨﲔ زاﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ أﻱ ﳾء ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻘﺪرة‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳊﺠﺐ ﺛﻘﻮب‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ أﻥ ﻳﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺗﺴﺨﲔ زاﺋﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺳﺠﺎد ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( أﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬أﻟﺒﺴﺔ( اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﳊﺮارة ﻛﺄﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ أﻭ أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ اﳍﻮاء اﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ أﻭ ﰲ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ ﻏﺒﺎر ﻛﺜﻴﻒ أﻭ اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ أﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮدﻱ‪ .‬اﳖﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﺎت ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺮاﻥ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻳﻒ أﻭ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎرد إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ داﻓﺊ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪ ،‬أﻭ اذا ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪة اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺜﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ داﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺗﺮﻙ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة ﺣﻮاﱄ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر‬
‫ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا دﺧﻞ ﳾء ﻣﺎ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫ﰲ اﳉﺪار ﻭاﻃﻠﺐ ﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ زﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺰﻭد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪة اﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎض أﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﲠﺎ‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ إﺻﺪار ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﻭاﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﲈء اﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫أﻱ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﻮاد اﻟﻜﺎﺷﻄﺔ أﻭ ﳏﺮﻭﻗﺎت اﻟﺼﻘﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ أﻭ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔ أﺳﺌﻠﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ أﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﻩ اﳌﻮاد أﻥ ﺗﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ‪ 15‬اﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أﻭ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﱰﻙ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر داﺋﻢ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت اﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻹﴐار ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫"‪."DVD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫"‪ "MECHA LOCK‬ﻭ"‪ "UNPLUG‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر اﳌﺆﴍ "‪."STANDBY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫اﳉﺪارﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﳌﺲ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ إﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻭرﻗﺔ أﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺴﺢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺮﻛﺰ اﱃ اﳊﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺣﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ أﻧﺒﻮب اﳍﻮاء اﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ أﻭ ﻻ ﺗﱰﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎرة ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮض ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫ﻻﻥ درﺟﺔ اﳊﺮارة ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﳌﻘﺼﻮرة ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ اﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أﻱ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻄﻼء )ﺛﻨﺮ( أﻭ اﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ اﻷﺳﻮاﻕ أﻭ‬
‫اﳌﺮﺷﺔ اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ داﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ داﺋﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﻗﻠﺐ أﻭ ﻧﺠﻢ( أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﲈﻟﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻮاﻕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﻫﺬا ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻋﲆ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻭاﺟﻬﺖ أﻱ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺘﺎﻋﺐ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ دﻟﻴﻞ ﹼ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﺻﻼح‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) S-AIR‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬اﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ )اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.(S-AIR‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻥ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ "‪ "STANDBY‬ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "PROTECTOR‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭاﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫ﻭ"‪ "PUSH POWER‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪."STANDBY‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺣﺪث ﲤﺎس ﰲ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭاﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪-‬؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳏﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﳾء؟‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد أﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ أﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ إﳚﺎد‬
‫اﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻳﺔ ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• أﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺮﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻓﺤﺺ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ )اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ )‪ ،(525p/625p‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮرة أﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫• أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ اﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز دﺧﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content.‬‬
‫)‪) Protection‬ﻻ ﻳﴤء "‪ "HDMI‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻹﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻮع إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .HDMI OUT‬ﲠﺬا‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻭﺣﺪة ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ دﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدﺗﻪ اﱃ‬
‫‪ .HDMI‬اذا ﻻ زاﻟﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪[VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﱂ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪.[OFF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع ﰲ ]‪ [TV TYPE‬اﳋﺎص ﺑـ‬
‫]‪ ،[VIDEO SETUP‬اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻻ ﲤﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪر أﻱ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳏﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ‬
‫اﻟﺘﴪب اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﳛﺪث ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﴪب اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﻻﻥ اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺰﻭد‬
‫ﺑﻘﻮة ﻛﺒﲑة‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع أﻧﺒﻮب اﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺛﻮدﻳﺔ ‪ CRT‬أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﺳﻘﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 0.3‬ﻣﱰ ﻋﲆ اﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ‪ 15‬اﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﺣﺪث زﻋﻴﻖ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﴚ‪ ،‬أﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺰﻻج ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺮﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ أﻭ ﲠﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻹﺷﺎرات ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫* ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺒﻠﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ]‪.[720 × 576p‬‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ MUTING‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪"MUTING ON‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﻲء اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ أﻭ اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﲣﺮج اﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫• اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳜﺮج ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ • .HDMI OUT‬اﺿﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺾ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز )‪) DVI (Digital Visual Interface‬اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪DVI (Digital‬‬
‫)‪ Visual Interface‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت(‪.‬‬
‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.Super Audio CD‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻻﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪  :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮ￯‪  .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻭاﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮ￯‪  .‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﺻﻮات اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ • ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭاﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮازﻧﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(68 ،24‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬ﻷﺟﻞ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭاﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﲈع ﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻋﻦ اﳌﺤﻮﻻت أﻭ اﳌﻮﺗﻮرات‪ ،‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﳖﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎح اﻟﻔﻠﻮرﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 3‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻋﲆ اﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﺎت ﻭاﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬اﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﺄﺛﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ • اﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪ [AUDIO‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ]‪ [STEREO‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬أﻭ ‪ CD‬أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪.MP3‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺳﲈع ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت)ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(68 ،24‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ ‪ • .MPEG‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 5.1‬ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ أﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ‬
‫‪.MPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ • ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺟﺪ ﹰا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.DIGITAL IN COAXIAL/OPTICAL‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(68 ،24‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(68 ،24‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻗﻞ ﺗﺂﺛﲑ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮدد اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت اﳋﺎص ﺑﺈﺷﺎرة اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ إذا اﺳﺘﺪﻋﻰ اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرات اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰا )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ أﻭ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ(‪ .‬اﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﱰدد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﲈع ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﻦ رادﻳﻮ ‪.AM‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬ﻭاﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺤﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﳏﻤﻠﺔ رأﺳ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺠﻬ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺜﻔﺖ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺗﺮﻙ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ISO 9660 Level 1/Level‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﰲ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪) [MODE(MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ‪UDF‬‬
‫)‪.(Universal Disk Format‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".MP3‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أﳖﺎ ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".MP3‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3PRO‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [IMAGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫• إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ ،[MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬أﻋﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬أﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ‪UDF‬‬
‫)‪.(Universal Disk Format‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ "‪ ".JPEG‬أﻭ "‪.".JPG‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3,072‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 2,048‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ أﻭ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪2,000,000‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻟﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ WEB‬ﰲ اﻻﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮر(‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ]‪)[MUSIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫• إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ ،[MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬أﻋﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".AVI‬أﻭ "‪.".DIVX‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ISO 9660‬‬
‫‪ Level 1/Level 2/Joliet‬أﻭ ‪.UDF‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 720‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺮﻭﻑ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]*[‪.‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪاﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﺑﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ أﻭ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DVD‬أﻭ ‪ PBC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ • .‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﻭ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ أﻭ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬
‫اﳊﺮﻛﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ]‪ [OSD‬ﲢﺖ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [LANGUAGE SETUP‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺎرات ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﲨﺎت ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• زﻭاﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "LOCKED‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪ [Data error‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.DCF‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ اﻧﻪ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".JPG‬أﻭ "‪.".JPEG‬‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".AVI‬أﻭ "‪ ".DIVX‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺼﺎدﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪DivX Certified‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﰲ اﳉﺪار‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ﻋﺪة دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪ [CUSTOM SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔاﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ • .HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻀﺊ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "HDMI‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪.[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺎﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .HDMI‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬اﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻪ اﻭ ﺣﺪث اﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﰲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) S-AIR‬ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ S-AIR‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﴤء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﲪﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻤﻘﺪار أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(79‬‬
‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬
‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• أﻭﻗﻒ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭاﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻤﻘﺪار أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) S-AIR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(79‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﲈ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ اﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• أﻭﻗﻒ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "RF CHANGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(83‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻬﲈ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺎدر ﺿﻮﺿﺎء أﻭ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻤﻘﺪار أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﲈ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ اﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• أﻭﻗﻒ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "RF CHANGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(83‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ID‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﺴﻴﺔ ‪ S-AIR‬ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.S-AIR‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭاﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪C 13 ،‬‬
‫‪ (50‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ اﳉﺪﻭﻝ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻹﺻﺪار ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻹﺻﺪار ]‪ X) [VER.X.XX‬ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ رﻗﻢ(‪ .‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻮﻧﻰ ‪ Sony‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VER.X.XX‬‬
‫‪C:13:50‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ أﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭ‪/‬أﻭ اﻟﻌﻼج‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪C13‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫‪C31‬‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬أﻋﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ‬
‫‪E XX‬‬
‫)‪ XX‬ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ رﻗﻢ( ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﺤﲇ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻊ إﺑﻼﻏﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪E 61 10 :‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ( ﻗﻮة اﻷﺧﺮاج ‪RMS‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪/‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﻴﴪ￯*‪ 143 :‬ﻭاط‬
‫)ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ*‪:‬‬
‫‪ 285‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1.5‬أﻭﻡ‪ 80 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ )ﻣﻘﺪر( ‪ 108‬ﻭاط ‪ 108 +‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ‬
‫‪(%1‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ( ﻗﺪرة اﻹﺧﺮاج ‪RMS‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯‪/‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪/‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﴪ￯‪/‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ*‪ 143 :‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻨﺎة‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ*‪:‬‬
‫‪ 285‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1.5‬أﻭﻡ‪ 80 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬
‫* ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﻭاﳌﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ )إﺷﺎرات ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج((‬
‫)‪ TV/VIDEO (AUDIO IN‬اﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 250/450 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫اﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 125/250 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬
‫اﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ )اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫)‪TV/VIDEO (COAXIAL IN/OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‪ 75 :‬أﻭﻡ‪- /‬‬
‫اﻃﺮاﻑ اﳋﺮج )إﺷﺎرات ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج((‬
‫ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻭاﻋﲆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 108.0 -‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 108.0 -‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫أﻃﺮاﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ 75‬أﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮازﻥ‬
‫اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪10.7‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ اﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭاﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 530‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 1,710 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 531‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 1,710 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻭرﻭﺑﺎ ﻭرﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭاﻟﴩﻕ اﻻﻭﺳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 531‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 1,602 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮزﻳﻠﻨﺪﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪531‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪1,710 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 530‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪1,710 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬
‫‪ 531‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 1,602 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 530‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪1,610 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ 450‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫أﻃﺮاﻑ اﳋﺮج‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD/DVD‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻴﺰر‬
‫ﻟﻴﺰر ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫)أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪λ :Super Audio CD/DVD‬‬
‫= ‪ 650‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﱰ(‬
‫)أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ 790 = λ : CD‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﱰ(‬
‫ﻣﺪة اﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎث‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮة‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮددات رﻗﻤﻲ ‪ PLL‬ﺑﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻮارﺗﺰ‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪ 75 ،1 Vp-p :VIDEO‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪:COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪ 75 ،1 Vp-p :Y‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 75 ، 0.7 Vp-p : P /C ، PB/C‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ :HDMI OUT‬ﻧﻮع ‪19) A‬دﺑﻮس(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-‬‬
‫‪(SS-TS81) (HDX276‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫اﳌﱰددات‪ ،‬ﳏﺠﻮب ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 225‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 82‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.7‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪(SS-TS82) (DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫اﳌﱰددات‪ ،‬ﳏﺠﻮب ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 540‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 78‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 290‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 1,045‬ﻣﻢ ‪ 1,230 -‬ﻣﻢ ×‬
‫‪ 290‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪ /‬ارﺗﻔﺎع ‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﳊﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 2.9‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ اﳊﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )‪(SS-CT80‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪(SS-TS80‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫اﻟﱰددات‪ ،‬ﳏﺠﻮب ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 164‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 82‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫اﻟﱰددات‪ ،‬ﳏﺠﻮب ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 265‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 93‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 71‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.7‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 165 :‬ﻭاط‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬ﻭاط )ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ اﻹﺧﺮاج )‪(DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺒﺎﴍ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎر اﻹﺧﺮاج )‪(DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫‪ 700‬ﻣﻴﲇ أﻣﺒﲑ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪ 430‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 85‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 415‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺒﺎرزة‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪ 5.2‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭاﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑ دﻭﻥ اﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪(SS-WS82‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱰددات‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 160‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 1.5‬أﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 225‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 395‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 325‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 6.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 120‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪ 60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬
‫اﳌﱰدد‪ 50/60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX275‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-HDX276‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 165 :‬ﻭاط‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬ﻭاط )ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 160 :‬ﻭاط‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬ﻭاط )ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﻢ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳉﻮدة ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DSD‬‬
‫)‪) Direct Stream Digital‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ(( )أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﺪﻳﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .(PCM‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪،DSD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺗﺮدد ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ اﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺬﻱ ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 64‬ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬ﻭاﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮدد ﻭاﺳﻊ ﻭﻣﺪ￯ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭاﺳﻊ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺪ￯ اﻟﱰدد‬
‫اﳌﺴﻤﻮع‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻫﻲ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﲤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎج ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super‬‬
‫‪ Audio CD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪.CD‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :Super Audio CD‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ذات اﺷﺎرة ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :(1CD‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮاءة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﺣﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫)اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫)اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪(CD‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪(3CD‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ أﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات )ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪5.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎة(‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ ﻛﻼ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﲔ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ داﻋﻲ ﻟﻘﻠﺐ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ ‪ Super Audio CD +‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ‪Parental Control‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ أﻋﲈر اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد ﻣﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﱃ أﺧﺮ￯؛ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ أﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻒ أﻭ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﻫﻜﺬا‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ )اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫إﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج ‪ 60 - 50‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 525‬ﺧﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.(NTSC‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻻﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺰداد ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭاﻟﻨﺼﻮص ﻭاﳋﻄﻮط اﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ أﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ‪ 525‬أﻭ ‪.625‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ )اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ(‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ NTSC‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮر‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻛﻞ إﻃﺎر‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﺑﲔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺧﻄﻮط‬
‫اﺳﺘﻄﻼع زﻭﺟﻴﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 60‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ S-master‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ ،Sony‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻤﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪ S-master‬اﻟﻠﺬاﻥ ﻳﻮﻓﺮاﻥ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺠﻬﺎر‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ اﳌﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﺼﻮرة اﺳﱰاﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ أداء اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻫﺶ‪ .‬إﻥ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻤﺔ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺪ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻷﻭﺳﻊ دﻭﻥ اﳊﺎﺟﺔ اﱃ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﱰددات‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﰲ ﻣﺪة ﻗﺼﲑة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby Pro Logic‬‬
‫‪ II‬ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ اﻟﱰددﻱ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬا‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮج اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳊﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‬
‫اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ دﻭﻥ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أﺻﻮات ﺟﺪﻳﺪة أﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﰐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻭﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪ .Dolby Surround‬ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ اﲡﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﺪ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺪرﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﱰب ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮدة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎرد ﻣﻦ ‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﺎة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻊ أﻱ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺣﻴﺰ ﹰا ﺻﻮﺗﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﺮﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻤﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﴪﺣﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DTS‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .DTS, Inc.‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﴚ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة‬
‫‪ .5.1‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻨﺎة‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ DTS‬ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة ‪5.1‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ اﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪High-Definition Multimedia) HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻣﴪح اﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ أﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻮر ﹰا ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪ .Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻮﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ اﱃ‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻹﺻﺪار ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ "‪"5.1‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻛﻘﻨﺎة ‪) 0.1‬ﻻﳖﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ إﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ اﳊﺎﺟﺔ اﱃ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات(‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ إﺷﺎرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫اﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ اﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫رﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻳﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ‬
‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬
‫إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭاﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﺑﺼﻮرة أﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺻﻮات ﺑﺪﻗﺔ أﻛﱪ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰة‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫‪ Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ أﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ زﻭج ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪(Interface‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت ﻭﺻﻮدة ﻋﺎﻟﻴﻲ اﳉﻮدة‪ .‬ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪High-bandwidth Digital Content) HDCP‬‬
‫‪ ،(Protection‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻇﻒ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ ﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪S-AIR‬‬
‫)اﻟﱰدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﲇ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص ﺑﴩﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ‬
‫‪(Sony‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﴩ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭاﺳﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳉﻮدة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺿﲈﻥ إرﺳﺎﻝ اﻟﻔﺎرﻕ اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ اﳌﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳉﻮدة ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻫﻮر‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﲈة "‪ "S-AIR‬ﻷﺟﻞ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻭاﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪ .EZW-RT10/EZW-T100‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪) ISM‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﺔ( ذات ﻣﺪ￯ ﻗﺪرﻩ ‪ 2.4‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﻭ اﳍﻮاﺗﻒ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬا إﺣﺪ￯ اﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬
.ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) ‫ﲥﺠﺌﺔ أﺳﲈء اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
1027
1028
1032
1039
1044
1045
1051
1052
1053
1057
1059
1060
1061
1066
1067
1070
1079
1093
1097
1103
1105
1109
1130
1142
1144
1145
1149
1150
1151
1157
1165
1166
1171
1174
1181
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali;
Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
1183
1186
1194
1196
1203
1209
1217
1226
1229
1233
1235
1239
1245
1248
1253
1254
1257
1261
1269
1283
1287
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1305
1307
1311
1313
1326
1327
1332
1334
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian;
Lettish
1345 Malagasy
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
1347
1349
1350
1352
1353
1356
1357
1358
1363
1365
1369
1376
1379
1393
1403
1408
1417
1428
1435
1436
1463
1481
1482
1483
1489
1491
1495
1498
1501
1502
1503
1505
1506
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan)Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto;
Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
RhaetoRomance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
SerboCroatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
1507
1508
1509
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1521
1525
1527
1528
1529
1531
1532
1534
1535
1538
1539
1540
1543
1557
1564
1572
1581
1587
1613
1632
1665
1684
1697
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
1703 ‫ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﹼ د‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
2044
2047
2046
2057
2070
2079
2090
2092
2115
2165
2174
2109
2248
2238
2254
2276
2304
2363
2362
2376
2390
2379
2427
2424
2436
2489
2501
2149
2499
2086
2528
2184
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
Chile
China
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
India
Indonesia
Italy
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Philippines
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
United
Kingdom
AR
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
106
‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻭأزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺸﺎر اﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ اﻷﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(109‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫زر‪) ‬اﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪/‬اﻹﻏﻼﻕ( )‪(44‬‬
‫أزرار اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(44‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ( )‪(12‬‬
‫زر اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪(39) FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‪(85 ،36 ،29) AUDIO IN/A.CAL MIC‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪(44) PHONES‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫زر‪) ‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( )‪(91 ،36‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪(44) VOLUME‬‬
‫اﻷزرار‪/‬اﳌﺆﴍات ‪(44) DISC 1-5‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )‪(44‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
DAV-HDX276 ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‬
ANTENNA
SPEAKER
FM
COAXIAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
SPEAKER
FRONT R
TV/VIDEO
FRONT L
SUR R
SUR L
VIDEO
OUT
AM
TV/VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
Y
DMPORT
COAXIAL
PB/CB
PR/CR
R AUDIO IN L
DC5V
0.7A MAX
HDMI OUT
CENTER SUBWOOFER
OPTICAL
DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475 ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
‫*اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‬
ANTENNA
EZW-T100
SPEAKER
FM
COAXIAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
SPEAKER
TV/VIDEO
FRONT R
FRONT L
SUR R
SUR L
VIDEO
OUT
AM
TV/VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
DMPORT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(26) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬

(26) HDMI OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬

(77 ،29) DMPORT (DIGITAL MEDIA PORT) ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
TV/VIDEO (DIGITAL IN COAXIAL/ ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
R AUDIO IN L
DC5V
0.7A MAX
HDMI OUT
CENTER SUBWOOFER


(26) OPTICAL)
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
.EZW-T100 ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺰع اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
*
(24) SPEAKER ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬
DAV- ‫ )اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬EZW-T100 ‫اﻟﺸﻖ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
(30) (‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬HDX275/DAV-HDX475


(32) FM COAXIAL 75Ω ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬

(29 ،26) TV/VIDEO (AUDIO IN R/L) ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬

(32) AM ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
(26) VIDEO OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬


AR
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
108
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر أﻭ رﻗﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎر أﻭ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ أﻭ اﻟﱰدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ أﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻚ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﳏﻄﺔ‪) .‬اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(71‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ )اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(72‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎﻝ ‪) S-AIR‬ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪) .‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-HDX275/DAV-HDX475‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(78‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ (Content Protection‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬اﻭ ‪DVI (Digital‬‬
‫)‪(26) .Visual Interface‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫‪(JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪) .NTSC‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.Super Audio CD/CD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪(87) .‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ اﱃ ‪High-bandwidth Digital) HDCP‬‬
‫)‪(48‬‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫أﻭﺻﺎﻑ اﻷزرار‬
‫اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳍﺠﺎﺋﻲ اﻻﲡﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
(86،71،48)  ‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‬
(44،36،34)  (‫اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬/‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
P–Z
A–O
(55)  PICTURE NAVI
(46)  ANGLE
(72) wj PRESET +/–
(46)  AUDIO
(86)  (‫اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬/‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬TV 
(86) wj (2PROG +/–
(72،62،50) es CLEAR
(84،71،50،48،36،34)
(87)  SLEEP
(44) ed DISC SKIP
(43)  SOUND MODE
(88،73)  DISPLAY
 
REPLAY/ADVANCE
(44) 
(44) wj 
(44)  
(44)  STEP

(44)  (‫ )ﺑﻂء‬SLOW

(44) e; (‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
(44) wk (‫ )إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
(44)  (‫ )ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
(84،50،48،36)  (6
DISPLAY
(86،48) ea RETURN
 (3S-AIR MODE
(46)  SUBTITLE
(72)  D.TUNING
(53)  DVD MENU
(88،87،40،34)  SYSTEM MENU
(53)  DVD TOP MENU
(74)  (4THEATER/THEATRE
(87)  DYNAMIC BASS
(86)  TOOLS
(84،71،50،48،36،34)  (1ENTER
(71)  TUNING +/–
(44،39)  FUNCTION +/–
(86) wl TV
(86)  MENU
(86) wj (5TV CH +/–
(44)  MUTING
(86)  TV INPUT
(87)  NIGHT
(86) ef TV VOL +/–
(75) eg ONE-TOUCH PLAY
(44)  VOLUME +/–
(86) es (2-/-(86) es (5
‫ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺰر‬ENTER ‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬،‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬.
‫ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ENTER ‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
.(86 ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
.‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‬
DAV-HDX275/DAV- ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت‬
.‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬HDX475
.‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ إﺳﻢ اﻟﺰر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‬
.‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫" أﻭ‬DVD" ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬."DMPORT"
DIGITAL MEDIA ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
.PORT
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
(6
AR
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
110
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا‪.‬‬
‫‪...    ...    ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪) 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ "‪ ."DMPORT‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ،DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬اﱃ ﺑﻨﻮد ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺸﺎر اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﲔ اﻷﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪد اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪد اﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)‪98( 99‬‬
‫)‪13( 99‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0: 0 4: 17‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪ALL DISCS‬‬
‫‪ONE DISC‬‬
‫‪TITLE‬‬
‫‪CHAPTER‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳋﻴﺎرات‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪Quit:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬
‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء اﳌﺆﴍ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫إﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭأﻧﻮاع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ ]‪) [TITLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(53‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ]‪) [SCENE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(53‬اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪) [TRACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ]‪) [CHAPTER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(53‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ]‪) [INDEX‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺮس اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ]‪) [INDEX‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ﻭاﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪) [TRACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ (DVD-RW/DVD-R‬اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ ]‪ [ORIGINAL‬أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ ]‪.[PLAY LIST‬‬
‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ]‪) [TIME‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻘﴤ ﻭزﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‪/‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳌﺮاد اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻧﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD/Super Audio CD/CD‬أﻭ إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫]‪) [MULTI/2CH‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪) [SUPER AUDIO CD/CD LAYER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ]‪) [PROGRAM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ]‪) [SHUFFLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ]‪) [REPEAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ )ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻔﺎت‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت( ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪ ،‬أﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﹼﻒ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬ﳎﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭاﺣﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪) [A/V SYNC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻ ﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪) [DISC MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ]‪) [BROWSING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(62‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ]‪) [QUICK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭاﺧﱰ ﻧﻌﻢ اﻭ ﻻ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ]‪[CUSTOM‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [FOLDER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ ]‪) [FILE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (1DivX‬اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ]‪) [DATE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(90‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﲑا رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ]‪) [INTERVAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪) [EFFECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ )اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬اﻟﺼﻮرة( ])‪) [MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺳﻼﻳﺪ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺮاد اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺳﻼﻳﺪ( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت؛ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﲈ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪.CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DivX‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪة ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [OFF‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ]‪ [PROGRAM‬ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ]‪ [SHUFFLE‬ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ]‪ [REPEAT‬ﻭﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ اﳌﺼﻨﹼﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪[PLAY LIST‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫ا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪45‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪Multi‬‬
‫‪8 Session‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ‪6‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪58 DATA CD‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪58 DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪109 ،48 Super Audio CD‬‬
‫اﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض ﻓﻮرﻱ ‪45‬‬
‫ت‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪74 HDMI‬‬
‫‪0‬ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ‪72‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪48 PBC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ‪51‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ ‪50‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ‪52‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮرﻱ ‪45‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ‪91 ،62 SETUP‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﴎﻳﻌﺔ ‪36 Quick Setup‬‬
‫ر‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪8‬‬
‫ز‬
‫زر ‪46 ANGLE‬‬
‫زر ‪45 DISC SKIP‬‬
‫زر ‪73 DISPLAY‬‬
‫زر ‪87 DYNAMIC BASS‬‬
‫زر ‪87 NIGHT‬‬
‫زر ‪56 PICTURE NAVI‬‬
‫زر ‪87 SLEEP‬‬
‫زر ‪،46 ،41 ،40 ،34 SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪88 ،87 ،83 ،81 ،72‬‬
‫س‬
‫ﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﻮ )ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ش‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪109 ،88‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪111‬‬
‫ص‬
‫ﺻﻮت اذاﻋﺔ اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪43‬‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475‬‬
‫)‪3-283-031-41(1‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪47 5.1‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ‪104 ،38‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ‪104‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪53 DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ‪106‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪107‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪108‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪40 ATTENUATE‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪91 COLD RESET‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪41 DEC. MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪34 DEMO‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪88 DIMMER‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪72 FM MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪83 RF CHANGE‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪54 TIME‬‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ ‪104‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪55 MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪55 JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪68 ،58 DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪77 DIGITAL MEDIA PORT‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪105 ،46‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪105 Pro Logic II‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪Dolby Surround‬‬
‫‪105 Pro Logic‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﴪﺣﻲ رﻗﻤﻲ ‪105 ،46 DTS‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪12‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪43‬‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫‪64 4:3 OUTPUT‬‬
‫‪A-Z‬‬
‫‪60 A/V SYNC‬‬
‫)‪66 AUDIO (HDMI‬‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪63‬‬
‫‪67 AUDIO DRC‬‬
‫‪66 AUDIO SETUP‬‬
‫‪،85 ،67 AUTO CALIBRATION‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪67 BACKGROUND‬‬
‫‪) BLACK LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد(‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫‪BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT‬‬
‫)‪) OUT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد )ﺧﺮج‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ(( ‪65‬‬
‫)‪64 COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD‬‬
‫‪65 CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫‪91 ،62 CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪) D. C. A. C.‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ( ‪105،85‬‬
‫‪43 DUAL MONO‬‬
‫‪57 EFFECT‬‬
‫‪HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia‬‬
‫)‪105 Interface‬‬
‫‪65 HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬
‫‪65 HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫)‪66 HDMI YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬‬
‫‪46 ILLUM MODE‬‬
‫‪57 INTERVAL‬‬
‫‪66 JPEG RESOLUTION‬‬
‫‪63 LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫‪) MENU‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪63‬‬
‫)‪57 MODE (MUSIC, IMAGE‬‬
‫‪68 MULTI-DISC RESUME‬‬
‫‪53 ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ‪63‬‬
‫‪،68 ،60 PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪) PAUSE MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ( ‪65‬‬
‫‪53 PLAY LIST‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT‬‬
‫)‪64 OUT‬‬
‫‪91 ،68 RESET‬‬
‫‪67 SCREEN SAVER‬‬
‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬
‫‪84 ،67‬‬
‫‪58 SPEAKER SETUP‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
68 (‫ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬CONNECTION
69 ،68 (‫ )ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬DISTANCE
69 (‫ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬LEVEL
63 ،46 (‫ )اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬SUBTITLE
67 SYSTEM SETUP
105 S-AIR
66 S-AIR SETUP
81 S-AIR STBY
69 (‫ )اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬TEST TONE
67 TRACK SELECTION
64 (‫ )ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬TV TYPE
63 VIDEO SETUP
66 VOLUME LIMIT
AR
115
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-41(1)
(1)
Sony Corporation Printed in China
DAV-HDX275/HDX276/HDX475
3-283-031-42(1)
Download PDF

advertising